2G Huawei NSN

Parameters
Table
Recommended value
Default
Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC
Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common
GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7 None None 0
BCC
Cell_Common
0~7
GPRS Support
Cell_Common
support GPRS
not support GPRS
EDGE Support
Cell_Common
No
No
Cellband
Cell_Common
RAC
Cell_Common
As per plan
As per plan
FH MODE
Cell_Common
As per frequency plan
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))
Cell_Common
63
62
Cell Extension Type
Cell_Common
Normal cell
Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping
Cell_Common
None
None
UL DTX
Cell_Common
Shall Use
Shall Use
Call Reestablishment Forbidden
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Cell_Common
Direct Retry
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
DL PC Allowed TRX Index
Cell_Common TRx
Yes Depend on invidual site
Yes 65535
TRX No.
TRx
Depend on invidual site
255
Cell Index
TRx
None
Site Index
TRx
65535
Active State
TRx
Activated
Activated
Receive Mode
TRx
Depends on BTS/site configuration
None
Basic_Parameter
63
62
DL DTX
Basic_Parameter
No (tunable based on performance)
Yes
Direct Retry
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Basic_Parameter
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
UL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Shall Use
Shall Use
Flex HSN Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Flex MAIO Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
15
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
26
63
Call_Control
18
26
Call_Control
12
16
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control
15
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)
Call_Control
26
63
Call_Control
18
24
Call_Control
12
14
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)
Call_Control
26
30
Call_Control
18
22
Call_Control
12
As per plan
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)
Call_Control
26
Call_Control
18
18
Call_Control
12
12
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
52
MS MAX Retrans
Call_Control
4 Times
N200 of SDCCH
Call_Control
23
23
AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
52
AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))
Call_Control
24
64
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold
Call_Control
75
85
T3105(10ms)
HO
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.
HO
30
30
ULQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
65
UL Qual. Threshold
HO
50
60
DL Qual. Threshold
HO
50
60
MS Power Prediction after HO
HO
No
No
Inter-System Handover Enable
HO
No
No
PBGT HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed
HO
No
No
Load HO Allowed
HO
Yes
No
SDCCH HO Allowed
HO
No
No
PT(s)
Idle_Mode
TO
Idle_Mode
Cell_Bar_Qualify
Idle_Mode
No
PI
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
CRH
Idle_Mode
6dB
6dB
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)
Idle_Mode
60(should same for same LAC)
20
BS-PA-MFRAMS
Idle_Mode
4 Multiframe Period
2 Multiframe Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Idle_Mode
NCC Permitted
Idle_Mode
255
11111111
Cell_Bar_Access
Idle_Mode
No
ATT
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
T3122(s)
Other_Properties
10
10
T3111(ms)
Other_Properties
1000
1000
T3109(ms)
Other_Properties
27000
27000
T8(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
T3121(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
T3107(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
T7(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
T3101(ms)
Other_Properties
3000
3000
Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)
Other_Properties
85
85
Other_Properties
87
87
Other_Properties
92
92
Other_Properties
98
98
Other_Properties
105
105
Other_Properties
110
110
Filter Length for DL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
Power_Control
DL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
DL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
20
25
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
30
35
UL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
25
20
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
35
30
PC Interval
Power_Control
Min Access Level Threshold
Data_In_PCU
15
15
PRACH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PBCCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
GPRS Penalty Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset
Data_In_PCU
10dB
10dB
T3192
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
T3168
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
Description
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.
This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell reselection. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used. Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.
This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.
This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.
This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.
This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message. After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds immediately. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.
Configuration Policy
NSN PARAMETER
Name
BAND None None This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon MCC MNC
Parameter Name
frequency band in use mobile country code mobile network code
BSIC NCC
BCC
bsIdentityCode
None GENA GPRSenabled
None EGENA egprsEnabled
None BAND frequency band in use
None RAC routing area code
None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected. HoppingMode
DMAX
msMaxDistanceInCallSetup
None DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup
None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference DTX 2. On the downlink
dtxMode
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based
RE
callReestablishmentAllowed
RXP
rxLevAccessMin
None DR drInUse
None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None PENA TRX_ID powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID
None
TRX_NUM
None CI None BTS_ID CellId BTS ID
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to STATE Not Activated.
Administrative State
None
RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.
diversityUsed
DMAX
msMaxDistanceInCallSetup
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. DOWNLINK DTX
None DR If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. DTX drInUse
rxLevAccessMin
callReestablishmentAllowed
dtxMode
None HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1
None FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT
None TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc
None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3
HRH3
HRH2
HRH1
None
HRTD3
None
HRTD2
None
HRTD1
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTU3
None
HRTU2
None
HRTU1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTD3
None
FRTD2
None
FRTD1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTU3
None
FRTU2
None
FRTU1
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.
RLT This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. RET
radioLinkTimeout
maxNumberRetransmission
None T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. T3105
AMR HR Radio Link Timeout
AMR Radio Link Timeout
DRT
drThreshold
The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.
NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
maxNumberOfRepetitions amrHoHrThrUlRxQual
QURH amrHoHrThrDlRxQual QDRH amrHoFrThrUlRxQual QURF amrHoFrThrDlRxQual QDRF
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QUR hoThresholdsQualUL
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced. hoThresholdsQualDL
POPT
msPwrOptLev
None ISHO
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. EPB It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. FMT fastMovingThreshold enablePwrBudgetHandover
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.
TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.
trhoTargetLevel
ESD
enableSDCCHHandover
None PET penaltyTime
None TEO temporaryOffset
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.
QUA
cellBarQualify
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell within 5s. PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. HYS cellReselectHysteresis cellReselectParamInd
It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic. To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS
The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance.
MFR
noOfMultiframesBetweenPagin g
None AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. PLMN plmnPermitted
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS. BAR cellBarred
None ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. T3122
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. T3101
T3109
T8
T3121
T3107
T7
None
BO5
interferenceAveragingProcess
None
BO4
None
BO3
None
BO2
None
BO1
None
BO0 On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QUS
pcAveragingQualDL / windows size
pcAveragingQualUL / windows size
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.
pcAveragingLevDL / windows size
LUS
pcAveragingLevUL / windows size
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual
LDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual
UDR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level LDR
PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level UDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual
LUR
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.
PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual
UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level LUR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. None
PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level
INT SL
powerControlInterval rxLevMinCell
None PRB bsPRACHBlocks
None PBB bsPBCCHBlocks
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.
GPET
gprsPenaltyTime
None GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus shortening the TBF establishment time. On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. T3192
If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. T3168
Unit
Step Size
Default Value
GSM 900 (0)
Range
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2...3 characters
0...7 Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment, otherwise read from RNW db. 07
NoYes
Y/N
GSM 900 (0)
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)
255
0255
No
No/BB/RF
TA
255
0...255
TA
255
0...2
Yes/No
dBm
-105
-110...-47
Yes/No
Y 1
Yes/No 1...16
165535 1...10 characters
Locked (3)
Y/N
TA
255
0...255
Yes/No
dBm
-105
-110...-47
Yes/No
0...2
0...63/N
0...2
0.5dB
015
0.5dB
015
0.5dB
015
SACCH
20
4...64
1, 2, 4 or 7
dBm
-100
-110-47
5...35
0...7
0...7
dBm
-110... -47/ N
Yes
Yes/No
SACCH
0...255
dBm
-109... -47/ N
Yes/No
sec
20
20
20...640
dB
10
0...70
Y/N
Y/N
dB
0...14
hours
0.5
0 / 0.1...25.5
2...9
0...7
NCC
07
Yes/No
Yes/No
dBm
-47
-47FIXED
dBm
-90
-110...-47
dBm
-95
-110...-47
dBm
-100
-110...-47
dBm
-105
-110...-47
dBm
-110
-110FIXED
SACCH
1...32
SACCH
1...32
SACCH
1...32
SACCH
1...32
sec dBm
2 -100
0...31 -110...-47
012
14
sec
10s
10
10320
dB
070
Parameter Name UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed Encryption Algorithm
DL DTX MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame,4.615ms)) Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS-PA-MFRAMS Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s) SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))
Proposed Remarks Value Shall Use Shall Use NA Yes Not matched 0 1 with other vendor No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes <1000000 NA 0> Tunable based on NA No performan ce 63 Old Value NA NA Yes NO
Unit None
None None None
None Bit Period
NO Yes 20 (32 NA Satelite Cells) NA 0 NA 255 NA 1 4 4 Multiframe Multiframe Period Period NA 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA 24 40 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0 24 Need to standerdiz e To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage Tunable based on performan ce Ericsson 60
RACH Busy Threshold
Paging Times
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable
NA
Disable Need to discuss with Huawei 47 Allowed & Recover When Check Res. 200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No 4 If use Imm_Ass Retrans, Default
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA Speech Version NA
TRX Aiding Function Control
NA
None
Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min.Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter
NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass
NA 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected NA 20 Yes 0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes
2 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected No 24 Yes 0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes
MS MAX Retrans Common Access Control Class Special Access Control Class Emergent Call Disable Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) ECSC
All vendor same platform
MBR
Power Deviation Indication
Power Deviation(2dB) Serving Band Reporting
1 NA
1 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter
Qsearch I
NA
NA
Qsearch C Initial
NA
NA
FDD Q Offset
NA
NA
FDD REP QUANT
NA
NA
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting
NA
NA
FDD Qmin
NA
NA
Qsearch P
NA
NA
3G Search PRIO
NA
NA
Invalid BSIC Reporting
NA
NA
Scale Order
NA
NA
Qsearch C
NA
NA
900 Reporting Offset
NA
NA
900 Reporting Threshold
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
FDD Reporting Offset
NA
NA
FDD Reporting Threshold
NA
NA
Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled Frequency Band of Reassign Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed Load HO Allowed MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed
No No NA No No No NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes No No No Yes NA NA NA NA
No No NO No No Same Band 2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes Yes No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes
Tunable based on performan ce
Tunable based on performan ce
None Tunable based on None performan ce None None
Concentric Circles HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
NA NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA 3
Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25 3
Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second Tunable based on dB performan ce Tunable based on Grade performan ce Second Second
Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR Allowed M.R Number Lost Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Filter Length for TA Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)
15 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes NA NA 6 NA 2 NA 6 6 NA NA NA NA
10 Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes Once Every Second 4 6 6 2 3 6 6 30 10 30 10
Second
None
None
Number of MR Number of MR None Number of MR Number of MR
dB
Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access K Bias UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s)
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35 NA Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA
63 10 30 255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4 Need to discuss with Huawei
dB
None None None None None None None None None
dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade
None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second
Assign Optimum Layer Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Traffic Threshold of Underlay Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed
System optimizatio n NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
System optimizatio n 35 63 No 0 System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 5 5 5 30 5 3 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter
None dBm Bit Period None Bit Period None None Grade Grade None
Second None Second Second Second None
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
NA
NA
Inter-RAT HO Preference
NA
NA
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell
NA
NA
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA
NA
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA
NA
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)
NA
NA
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)
NA
NA
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP
NA
NA
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP
NA
NA
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP
NA
NA
3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP
NA
NA
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA
NA
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. Upper Threshold UL Qual. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual. Upper Threshold DL Qual. Lower Threshold Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Filter Length for UL Qual. Filter Length for DL Qual. MR. Compensation Allowed UL MR. Number Predicted DL MR. Number Predicted MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for UL Qual AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
NA 30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 4 NA 4 NA Yes 1 1 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3 4 4 4 4 Yes
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted AMR DL MR. Number Predicted AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Idle TCH Threshold N1 Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) Interf. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf.of UL Level Threshold Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold Interf.of DL Level Threshold Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual. Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual.
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 80 60 NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA 6 6 2 2
1 1 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 2 80 60 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 1 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50 6 6 2 2
MR Number MR Number Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade dB dB dB dB dB Grade dB None dB None dB None None Second None
Minute Percentag e None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None
Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed
NA NA NA
30 2 Yes 2 60 Yes 30 30 Need to discuss with Huawei <0110111 000> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3 Need to discuss with Huawei 110 105 98 92 87 85 20 Need to discuss with Huawei 65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15 5000 360
Minute None
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA NA NA NA
Second
NA
Data service Allowed SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
None None
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15
Second
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA
Included Angle(Degree)
NA
360 Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHoppin g
PWRC
Not selected
Yes
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Release Indication Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Drop Optimize Resource Check Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms)
5 (900), 0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
5 (900), 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000
Second None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None ms ms ms ms ms
T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s)
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10
ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
Parameters
Table
Recommended Value Single band 900MHz
Default
Multiband
Frequency Band
Cell_Common
GSM900
GSM900&DCS1800
Administrative State
Cell_Common
Unlocked
Unlocked
Layer of the Cell
Cell_Common
MCC
Cell_Common
470
470
None
MNC
Cell_Common
02
02
None
NCC
Cell_Common
0~7
0~7
BCC
Cell_Common
0~7
0~7
Cell Priority
Cell_Common
Prior-1
Prior-1
Prior-1
Activity Status
Cell_Common
Activated
Activated
Activated
PCU
Cell_Common
255
255
255
GPRS Support
Cell_Common
support GPRS
support GPRS
not support GPRS
Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
EDGE Support
Cell_Common
No
No
No
8PSK power attenuation grade
Cell_Common
Support NACC
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Support PACKET SI STATUS
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Support NC2
Cell_Common
No
No
No
PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Level report switch
Cell_Common
Support
Support
Support
Cellband
Cell_Common
RAC
Cell_Common
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Support DTM
Cell_Common
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Support Enhanced DTM
Cell_Common
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Encryption Algorithm
Cell_Common
00000001
00000001
FH MODE
Cell_Common
DL DTX
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cell_Common
62
62
62
Cell Extension Type
Cell_Common
Normal cell
Normal cell
Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping
Cell_Common
None
None
None
Enhanced Concentric Allowed
Cell_Common
No
Yes
Yes
Cell Type
Cell_Common
Normal Cell
Concentric Cell
Normal cell
Attributes of UL And OL Subcells
Cell_Common
NONE
NONE
NONE
BCCH Concentric Attribute
Cell_Common
None
Underlaid Subcell
None
UL DTX
Cell_Common
Shall Use
Shall Use
Shall Use
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Cell_Common
TCH Immediate Assignment
Cell_Common
No
No
No
Direct Retry
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL PC Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
DL PC Allowed
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier
Cell_Common
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
TRX Index
TRx
65535
TRX No.
TRx
255
Cell Index
TRx
None
Site Index
TRx
65535
Board Type
TRx
None
Active State
TRx
Activated
Activated
Activated
Abis Mode
TRx
Auto
Auto
Auto
Cabinet No.
TRx
Subrack No.
TRx
Slot No.
TRx
None
TEI
TRx
Out-BSC Subrack No.
TRx
Out-BSC Slot No.
TRx
None
Out-BSC Port No.
TRx
None
Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
RSL In Site Port No.
TRx
255
RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
RSL Logic No.
TRx
2048
Hop Type
TRx
None
Power Level
TRx
Power Type
TRx
Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration
Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration
Default
HW_Concentric Attribute
TRx
None
TRX Priority
TRx
Level0
Level0
Level0
Shut Down Enable
TRx
Enable
Enable
Enable
TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx
Yes
Yes
No
TRX 8PSK Level
TRx
Wireless Link Alarm Flag
TRx
No
No
No
Abnormal Release Statistic Base
TRx
100
100
100
Abnormal Warn Threshold
TRx
100
100
100
Abnormal Release Threshold
TRx
50
50
50
Statical Period of Notraffic(5min)
TRx
48
48
48
Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit
TRx
Yes
Yes
Yes
WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min)
TRx
12
12
12
Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour)
TRx
End Time of WLA Detection(hour)
TRx
22
22
22
Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference
Up Down Balance Floating Range
TRx
30
30
30
Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold
TRx
80
80
80
Receive Mode
TRx
None
Send Mode
TRx
None
Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier
Yes
Yes
No
Antenna Hopping Index
TRx
No
No
No
Power Finetune
TRx
Default
Default
Default
TRX Antenna Hopping TRx
None
None
None
Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse Out-BSC Port No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse RSL In Site Port No.
TRx
255
255
255
Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx
255
255
255
Transmission Type of Abis Interface
TRx
TDM
TDM
TDM
Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier
TRx
MaxAbisTSOccupied
TRx
32
32
32
Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT)
TRx
255
255
255
InHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
HubHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
TRXNoInHub
TRx
255
255
255
XPUSlotNo
TRx
TRX Ability
TRx
PhysicalPassNo
TRx
Priority
TRx
NONE
QTRU Priority
TRx
255
255
RevInHDLCIndex
TRx
65535
65535
65535
Time Slot Power Rerserve
TRx
Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Basic_Parameter
63
63
62
DL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Encryption Algorithm
Basic_Parameter
DL PC Allowed
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL PC Allowed
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Direct Retry
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Immediate Assignment
Basic_Parameter
No
No
No
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Basic_Parameter
Basic_Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL DTX
Basic_Parameter
Shall Use
Shall Use
Shall Use
GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold
CH_MGT
25
25
25
Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power
No
No
Yes
Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation
CH_MGT
Qtru Estimate Bts Power
CH_MGT
35
35
35
Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time
CH_MGT
Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time
CH_MGT
Qtru Power Sharing
CH_MGT
None
None
None
Observed time of uplink received level difference Duration of uplink received level difference
CH_MGT
CH_MGT
Smooth factor of uplink received level
CH_MGT
Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold
CH_MGT
100
100
100
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
CH_MGT
50
50
50
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell
50
50
50
Flex HSN Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Close
Flex MAIO Switch
CH_MGT
Close
Close
Close
Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)
80
80
80
Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)
80
80
80
TCH req suspend interval(s)
CH_MGT
60
60
60
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed
CH_MGT
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Update Freq.of CH Record
CH_MGT
Update Period of CH Record(min)
CH_MGT
30
30
30
Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual.
Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level
Filter Length for TCH Qual.
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Filter Length for TCH Level
CH_MGT
Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
Interf.of DL Level Threshold
CH_MGT
25
25
25
Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold
CH_MGT
40
40
40
Interf.of UL Level Threshold
CH_MGT
10
10
10
History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allocation TRX Priority CH_MGT Allowed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)
CH_MGT
50
50
TIGHT BCCH Switch
CH_MGT
No
No
No
Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported
Not Support
DPBT
Not Support
Channel Allocate Strategy
CH_MGT
Capability preferred
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed
CH_MGT
Yes
Yes
Yes
TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s)
CH_MGT
60
60
60
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum
CH_MGT
80
80
80
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1
CH_MGT
AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control
Call_Control
10
10
15
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
30
30
63
Call_Control
18
18
26
Call_Control
12
12
16
Call_Control
10
10
15
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
30
30
63
Call_Control
18
18
24
Call_Control
12
12
14
AMR ACS(H)
Call_Control
1101
1101
1101
AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
38
38
30
Call_Control
28
28
22
Call_Control
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
18
Call_Control
20
20
12
AMR ACS(F)
Call_Control
11100100
11100100
11100100
Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times
Frequency Band of Reassign
Call_Control
Same Band
Different Band
Different Band
Short Message Downlink Disabled
Call_Control
No
No
No
Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.
No
No
No
Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch
Call_Control
No
No
No
Allow EMLPP
Call_Control
No
No
No
Allow Reassign
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
TDD Cell Threshold
Call_Control
TDD Cell offset
Call_Control
Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control
TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB)
Call_Control
FDD Reporting Threshold
Call_Control
FDD Reporting Offset
Call_Control
Call_Control
1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control
Call_Control
Call_Control
Qsearch C
Call_Control
15
15
15
Scale Order
Call_Control
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control
No
No
No
3G Search PRIO
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Qsearch P
Call_Control
15
15
15
FDD Qmin
Call_Control
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting
Call_Control
FDD REP QUANT
Call_Control
RSCP
RSCP
RSCP
FDD Q Offset
Call_Control
Qsearch C Initial
Call_Control
Use Qsearch_I
Use Qsearch_I
Use Qsearch_I
Qsearch I
Call_Control
15
15
15
Serving Band Reporting Call_Control
Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control
Power Deviation Indication
Call_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
MBR
Call_Control
ECSC
Call_Control
No
Yes
NO
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))
24
24
52
Emergent Call Disable
Call_Control
No
No
No
Special Access Control Call_Control Class
00000
00000
00000
Common Access Control Class
Call_Control
0000000000
0000000000
0000000000
MS MAX Retrans
Call_Control
4 Times
4 Times
4 Times
Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms)
Use Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit Parameter
No
No
No
N200 of FACCH/Full rate
Call_Control
34
34
34
N200 of FACCH/Half rate
Call_Control
29
29
29
N200 of SDCCH
Call_Control
23
23
23
N200 of SACCH
Call_Control
N200 of Release
Call_Control
N200 of Establish
Call_Control
Use LAPDm N200
Call_Control
No
No
No
T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms)
Call_Control
200
200
200
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms)
Call_Control
150
150
150
T200 FACCH/H(5ms)
Call_Control
50
50
50
T200 FACCH/F(5ms)
Call_Control
50
50
50
T200 SDCCH(5ms)
Call_Control
60
60
60
RACH Min.Access Level(dbm)
Call_Control
-115
-115
-115
Random Access Error Threshold
Call_Control
200
200
180
TRX Aiding Function Control
Call_Control
Allowed & Recover When Check Res
Allowed & Recover When Check Res
TRX Aiding Not Allowed
Speech Version
Call_Control
11
11
11
AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))
24
24
52
24
24
64
AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))
24
24
32
24
24
48
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold
Call_Control
75
75
85
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable
Call_Control
Disable
Disable
Disable
Paging Times
Call_Control
RACH Busy Threshold
Call_Control
16
16
16
SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))
24
24
31
T3105(10ms)
HO
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.
HO
30
30
30
TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed
No
No
TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s)
TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s)
TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
HO
50
50
50
TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell
HO
25
25
25
TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference
HO
Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold
Quick Handover Offset(dB)
HO
68
68
68
Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB)
63
63
63
Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s)
10
10
10
Ignore Measurement Report Number
HO
Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number
HO
Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number
HO
Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s)
HO
Quick Handover Static HO Time(0.5s)
Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s)
HO
80
80
80
Quick Handover Down HO Trigger Level(dB)
63
63
63
Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB)
HO
63
63
63
Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%)
90
90
90
Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s)
As per plan
As per plan
As per plan
Total Number of Measurements(s)
HO
Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s)
HO
Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)
25
25
25
Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)
Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO
Yes
Yes
OL Subcell Load HO Diversity HO Period(s)
10
10
10
Load HO of OL Subcell HO to UL Subcell Enabled
No
No
No
Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s)
HO
Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO
UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s)
HO
Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB) Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB) Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO
HO
10
10
10
HO
10
10
10
UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%)
90
90
90
UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%)
80
80
Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%)
50
50
50
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s)
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)
HO
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
HO
35
35
35
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
HO
50
50
50
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell
HO
25
25
25
Inter-RAT HO Preference
HO
Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold
Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold
HO
35
35
35
Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold
HO
25
25
25
ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR
60
60
60
ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO FR
65
65
65
En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step
HO
En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period
HO
En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold
90
90
90
En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold
85
85
85
En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold
HO
30
30
20
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail
HO
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s)
HO
10
10
10
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s)
HO
40
40
40
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s)
HO
10
10
10
Underlay HO Step Level
HO
Underlay HO Step Period(s)
HO
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
UtoO HO Received Level Threshold
HO
32
32
35
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold
HO
18
18
25
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer
HO
Underlaid Subcell
Underlaid Subcell
Underlaid Subcell
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC
HO
System Optimization
System Optimization
System Optimization
TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref.
TA Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed
HO
No
No
No
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.
HO
63
63
63
Assign-optimum-level Threshold
HO
35
35
35
Assign Optimum Layer HO
System Optimization
System Optimization
System Optimization
UO HO Valid Time(s)
HO
UO HO Watch Time(s) HO
TA Hysteresis
HO
TA Threshold
HO
63
63
63
RX_QUAL Threshold
HO
50
50
60
RX_LEV Hysteresis
HO
RX_LEV Threshold
HO
35
35
35
UO Signal Intensity Difference
HO
TA for UO HO Allowed HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
OL to UL HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL to OL HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO
HO
80
80
80
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO
HO
K Bias
HO
UL Expected Level at HO Access
HO
30
30
30
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s)
HO
40
40
40
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO
HO
30
30
30
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.
HO
Forbidden time after MAX Times
HO
20
20
20
MAX Consecutive HO Times
HO
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold
HO
15
15
15
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells
HO
MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells
Load HO Step Level
HO
Load HO Step Period
HO
10
10
10
Load HO Bandwidth
HO
25
25
25
Load Req.on Candidate HO Cell
75
75
75
Load HO Threshold
HO
85
85
85
System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO
10
10
10
ULQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR
HO
60
60
60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
60
65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR
HO
60
60
65
RXLEVOff
HO
RXQUAL12
HO
50
50
50
RXQUAL11
HO
51
51
51
RXQUAL10
HO
52
52
52
RXQUAL9
HO
53
53
53
RXQUAL8
HO
54
54
54
RXQUAL7
HO
55
55
55
RXQUAL6
HO
56
56
56
RXQUAL5
HO
57
57
57
RXQUAL4
HO
58
58
58
RXQUAL3
HO
59
59
59
RXQUAL2
HO
60
60
60
RXQUAL1
HO
70
70
70
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit
HO
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit
HO
60
60
60
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Filter Parameter B
HO
Filter Parameter A8
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A7
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A6
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A5
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A4
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A3
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A2
HO
10
10
10
Filter Parameter A1
HO
10
10
10
UL Qual. Threshold
HO
60
60
60
DL Qual. Threshold
HO
60
60
60
Emergency HO TA Threshold
HO
255
255
255
DtxMeasUsed
HO
Open
Open
Open
CfgPenaltyTimer
HO
255
255
255
UmPenaltyTimer
HO
10
10
10
RscPenaltyTimer
HO
Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO
Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
Penalty Time after HO AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)
30
30
30
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT
HO
Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP
HO
Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP
HO
Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP
Penalty Time after TA HO(s)
HO
30
30
30
Penalty Level after TA HO
HO
63
63
63
Penalty Time after BQ HO HO(s)
15
15
15
Penalty Level after BQ HO HO
63
63
63
Penalty Level after HO HO Fail
30
30
30
Filter Length for TA
HO
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV
HO
Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual
Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level
Filter Length for TCH Qual
HO
Filter Length for TCH Level
HO
Allowed M.R Number Lost
HO
Min Power Level For Direct Try
HO
25
25
16
Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR
HO
Twice every second
Twice every second
Twice every second
Transfer BS/MS Power HO Class
Yes
Yes
Yes
Transfer Original MR
HO
Yes
Yes
No
MR.Preprocessing
HO
No
No
No
MS Power Prediction after HO
HO
No
No
No
Penalty Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed
HO
No
No
No
Min Interval for Emerg.HOs
HO
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs
HO
Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs
Min Interval for TCH HOs
HO
ATCBHoSwitch
HO
Open
Open
Open
TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s)
HO
TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s)
Quick Handover Enable HO
NO
NO
NO
H2F HO Threshold
HO
10
10
10
F2H HO Threshold
HO
30
30
25
Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s)
HO
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s)
HO
Intracell F-H HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
YES
Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell
HO
15
15
15
Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell
HO
10
10
10
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
HO
Inter-layer HO Threshold
HO
25
25
25
Inter-System Handover HO Enable
No
No
No
PBGT Valid Time(s)
HO
PBGT Watch Time(s)
HO
Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO
Layer HO Watch Time(s)
HO
Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s)
HO
Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s)
Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO
Edge HO Watch Time(s)
HO
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold
HO
20
20
20
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold
HO
10
10
10
Interference HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Concentric Circles HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
TA HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
BQ HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fringe HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Level HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
PBGT HO Allowed
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Load HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Intracell HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
SDCCH HO Allowed
HO
No
No
No
Co-BSC/MSC Adj
HO
Yes
Yes
Yes
PT(s)
Idle_Mode
TO
Idle_Mode
ACS
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
CRO(2dB)
Idle_Mode
Cell_Bar_Qualify
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
PI
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
CRH
Idle_Mode
6dB
6dB
6dB
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)
Idle_Mode
60
60
20
BS-PA-MFRAMS
Idle_Mode
4 Multiframe Period
4 Multiframe Period
2 Multiframe Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Idle_Mode
NCC Permitted
Idle_Mode
11111111
11111111
11111111
Cell_Bar_Access
Idle_Mode
No
No
No
Tx-integer
Idle_Mode
32
32
32
ATT
Idle_Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Timer for UL Data Forward(ms)
Other_Properties
10
10
10
WaitforRelIndAMRHR
Other_Properties
26000
26000
26000
WaitforRelIndAMRFR
Other_Properties
34000
34000
34000
T3103C(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3122(s)
Other_Properties
10
10
10
TREESTABLISH(ms)
Other_Properties
15000
15000
15000
T3111(ms)
Other_Properties
1000
1000
1000
T3109(ms)
Other_Properties
27000
27000
27000
T8(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3121(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3107(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T7(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
T3103A(ms)
Other_Properties
10000
10000
10000
ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms)
Other_Properties
5000
5000
5000
T3101(ms)
Other_Properties
3000
3000
3000
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable
No
No
No
Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Qtru Signal Merge Switch
Other_Properties
No
No
No
MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period
Other_Properties
220
220
220
Other_Properties
180
180
180
Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs
Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs
Other_Properties
Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface
Other_Properties
Forced turn-on
Forced turn-on
Forced turn-on
Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type
Other_Properties
Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II
Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II
Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lower-level sublink resources preemption Other_Properties switch
No
No
No
Sublink resources preemption switch
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH
Other_Properties
No
No
No
Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type
Maximum/Mean Value
Maximum/Mean Value
Maximum/Mean Value
Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize Resource Check
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize No MR Other_Properties For Long Time
Drop Optimize Forced Other_Properties Handover Failure
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize ABIS Other_Properties Territorial Link Failure
Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention)
Other_Properties
Other_Properties
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)
Other_Properties
Other_Properties
Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited Other_Properties DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)
Other_Properties
Directly Magnifier Site Other_Properties Flag
No
No
No
Aiding Delay Protect Time(min)
Other_Properties
15
15
15
Abis Flow Control Permitted
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Support Half Rate
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
No
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties
PWRC
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
ActGene
Other_Properties
PS LowPri ServicePRI
Other_Properties
PS HighPRI ServicePRI
Other_Properties
CS Data ServicePRI
Other_Properties
CS Voice ServicePRI
Other_Properties
Included Angle(Degree)
Other_Properties
360
360
360
Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)
Other_Properties
360
360
360
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number
Other_Properties
5000
5000
5000
Overload Indication Period
Other_Properties
15
15
15
CCCH Load Threshold
Other_Properties
80
80
80
CCCH Load Indication Period(s)
Other_Properties
15
15
15
Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)
10
10
10
Frequency Adjust Value
Other_Properties
36671
36671
36671
Frequency Adjust Switch
Other_Properties
NO
NO
NO
VSWR TRX Error Threshold
Other_Properties
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold
Power Output Reduction Threshold
Other_Properties
Power Output Error Threshold
Other_Properties
DC Bias Voltage Threshold
Other_Properties
Frame Start Time
Other_Properties
65535
65535
65535
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)
Other_Properties
Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))
Other_Properties
20
20
20
Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 5 (-dBm)
85
85
85
87
87
87
92
92
92
98
98
98
105
105
105
110
110
110
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold
Other_Properties
50
SMCBC DRX
Other_Properties
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data service Allowed
Other_Properties
118
118
118
Power boost before HO enabled or not
Other_Properties
StartUp
StartUp
not StartUp
Voice quality report switch
Other_Properties
report
report
not report
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted
Other_Properties
255
255
Yes
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB)
Power_Control
53
53
53
Power_Control
50
50
50
Power_Control
47
47
47
Power_Control
43
43
43
Power_Control
40
40
40
Power_Control
30
30
30
Power_Control
20
20
20
Power_Control
HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
12
12
12
Power_Control
16
16
16
Power_Control
12
12
12
Power_Control
16
16
16
Power_Control
16
16
16
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold
20
20
20
HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold
30
30
30
HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor
HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length
Power_Control
HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length
HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB)
Power_Control
HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB)
Power_Control
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB)
12
12
12
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
Power_Control
12
12
12
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
16
16
16
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control
22
22
22
HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold
25
25
25
HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold
35
35
35
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor
Power_Control
HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window
Power_Control
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length
HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length
HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number
Power_Control
HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number
Power_Control
HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period
HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period
Power_Control
HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed
Power_Control
AMR BTS PC Class
Power_Control
16
16
16
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold
AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff
Power_Control
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.
Power_Control
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV
Power_Control
16
16
16
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.
Power_Control
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2
Power_Control
Power_Control
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold
30
30
25
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold
40
40
35
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold
25
25
20
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold
35
35
30
AMR DL MR. Number Predicted
Power_Control
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted
Power_Control
AMR MR. Power_Control Compensation Allowed
Yes
Yes
Yes
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.
Power_Control
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual
Power_Control
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
Power_Control
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
Power_Control
AMR PC Interval
Power_Control
BTS PC Class
Power_Control
16
16
16
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff
Power_Control
UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold
Power_Control
MAX Up Adj. PC Value Power_Control by Qual.
MAX Up Adj. PC Value Power_Control by RX_LEV
16
16
16
MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.
Power_Control
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2
Power_Control
Power_Control
Power_Control
DL MR. Number Predicted
Power_Control
UL MR. Number Predicted
Power_Control
MR. Compensation Allowed
Power_Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Filter Length for DL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL Qual.
Power_Control
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
Power_Control
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
Power_Control
Power Control Algorithm Switch
Power_Control
HWII Power Control
HWII Power Control
HW-II Power Control
DL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
DL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
30
30
25
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
40
40
35
UL Qual. Lower Threshold
Power_Control
UL Qual. Upper Threshold
Power_Control
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold
Power_Control
25
25
20
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
Power_Control
35
35
30
PC Interval
Power_Control
Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control Measured Receive Power Level Channel
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
pdch
pdch
pdch
BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH
Data_In_PCU
-2dB
-2dB
-2dB
Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Initial Power Level
Data_In_PCU
14
14
14
Alpha Parameter
Data_In_PCU
Maximum Value of N3105
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
2400
2400
2400
Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
2000
2000
2000
Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU
120
120
120
Load Reselect Level Threshold
Data_In_PCU
40
40
40
GPRS Quality Threshold
Data_In_PCU
EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold
Data_In_PCU
Cell Reselect Interval(s)
Data_In_PCU
Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Cell Normal Reselection Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
Cell Load Reselection Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed
Data_In_PCU
Permit
Permit
Permit
2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy
Data_In_PCU
Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell Cell
Preference for 2G Cell
Filter Window Size
Data_In_PCU
Allowed Measure Report Missed Number
Data_In_PCU
Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
60
60
60
Load Reselection Start Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
85
85
85
MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold
Data_In_PCU
200
200
200
Cell Penalty Last Time(s)
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Cell Penalty Level
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
Cell Reselection Hysterisis
Data_In_PCU
Min Access Level Threshold
Data_In_PCU
15
15
15
Support QoS Optimize
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy
Data_In_PCU
No handover No handover No handover between between between underlaid underlaid subcell underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid and overlaid and overlaid subcell subcell subcell 650 650 650
Transmission Delay of POC Service
Data_In_PCU
Max. GBR for POC Service
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
Min. GBR for POC Service
Data_In_PCU
Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Support Gbr QoS
Data_In_PCU
Not Support
Not Support
Not Support
Downlink Default MCS Type
Data_In_PCU
MCS6
MCS6
MCS6
Downlink Fixed MCS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Uplink Default MCS Type
Data_In_PCU
MCS2
MCS2
MCS2
Uplink Fixed MCS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
BEP Period
Data_In_PCU
Link Quality Control Mode
Data_In_PCU
LA
LA
LA
Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Downlink Default CS Type
Data_In_PCU
CS2
CS2
CS2
Downlink Fixed CS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Uplink Default CS Type
Data_In_PCU
CS1
CS1
CS1
Uplink Fixed CS Type
Data_In_PCU
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
UNFIXED
Background Service Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
THP3 Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
ARP3 Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot
Data_In_PCU
15
15
15
Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU
Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU
All dynamic All dynamic All dynamic channels can be channels can be pre- channels can be pre-empted empted preempted.
Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell
Data_In_PCU
Only convert at UL
Only convert at UL
only convert dynamic channel at UL
PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold
Data_In_PCU
80
80
80
PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold
Data_In_PCU
70
70
70
Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Data_In_PCU
30
30
30
MultiBand reporting
Data_In_PCU
Report the frequencies of six strongest cells
Threshold of HCS Signal Strength
Data_In_PCU
-110dB
-110dB
-110dB
Cell HCS Prior Class
Data_In_PCU
Maximum TX Power for Access PCH
Data_In_PCU
Minimum Receiving level for Access
Data_In_PCU
Exclusive Access
Data_In_PCU
Not Exclusive
Not Exclusive
Not Exclusive
Cell Access Bar Switch
Data_In_PCU
Permit Cell Access
Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access
Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area
Data_In_PCU
2dB
2dB
2dB
Cell Reselection Forbidden Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
10sec
10sec
Allow MS to Access to another Cell
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset
Data_In_PCU
GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not
Data_In_PCU
c31standard
c31standard
c31standard
GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis
Data_In_PCU
2dB
2dB
2dB
Support PSI Status Message
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
Allow MR Command or not
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
PSI1 Repetition Period
Data_In_PCU
Persistence Level 4
Data_In_PCU
16
16
16
Persistence Level 3
Data_In_PCU
14
14
14
Persistence Level 2
Data_In_PCU
13
13
13
Persistence Level 1
Data_In_PCU
12
12
12
Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Data_In_PCU
20
20
20
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Data_In_PCU
Access Control Class
Data_In_PCU
PRACH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PAGCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
PBCCH Blocks
Data_In_PCU
Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode
Data_In_PCU
0.96sec
0.96sec
0.96sec
Data_In_PCU
15.36sec
15.36sec
15.36sec
Non-DRX Period
Data_In_PCU
0.24sec
0.24sec
0.24sec
GPRS Reselection Offset
Data_In_PCU
-2db
-2db
-2dB
GPRS Penalty Time
Data_In_PCU
10sec
10sec
10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset
Data_In_PCU
10dB
10dB
10dB
Extension MR Period
Data_In_PCU
60sec
60sec
60sec
Extension MR Type
Data_In_PCU
type1
type1
type1
Interference Frequency
Data_In_PCU
NCC_PERMITTED
Data_In_PCU
Extension Measurement Command
Data_In_PCU
em0
em0
em0
BSS Paging Coordination
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Support 11BIT EGPRS Access
Data_In_PCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Routing Area Color Code
Data_In_PCU
Packet Access Priority
Data_In_PCU
Packet access of level 4
Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH
Data_In_PCU
No
No
No
Network Control Mode
Data_In_PCU
nc0
nc0
nc0
Pan Max.
Data_In_PCU
12
12
12
Pan Increment
Data_In_PCU
Pan Decrement
Data_In_PCU
BS_CV_MAX
Data_In_PCU
10
10
10
Control Acknowledge Type
Data_In_PCU
Four access Four access pulses Four access pulses pulses by default by default by default
Access Burst Type
Data_In_PCU
8bit
8bit
8bit
Max. Duration of DRX(s)
Data_In_PCU
4s
T3192
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
500ms
T3168
Data_In_PCU
500ms
500ms
500ms
Network Operation Mode
Data_In_PCU
Network Network Operation Network Operation Mode Mode II Operation Mode II II
Description
Configuration Policy
This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m
The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is high. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell.
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China None is 460.
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
None
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the same layer have the same priority. For details, refer to Layer of the Cell. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated.
This parameter should be set as required. 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo None
This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) None must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv
None
This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 None dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs (NACC) function. the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission advance. mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status None message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. None In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to the number of neighbor cells. No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be None reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot None be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. None Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC. This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen
None
None
None
None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.
None
None
This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. None If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use form a concentric cell. different frequency reuse modes. Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL The concentric cell technology can be combined This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. None
When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not configured in the UL subcell. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n
None
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may None fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
None
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047
None
None
None
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a None BSC.
This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.
None If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.
This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.
This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when None the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.
This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located.
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in None the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the Abis interface. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3 This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board. This parameter is to be viewed only.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the None timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links None share one number. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH, If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The doublewhere the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH, frequency diversity. including the timeslot FH and frame FH, but do not support This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this parameter Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power is, the smaller the transmit power is. Level; however, when the antenna is over high and covers When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. too many cells, you should lower the antenna and increase Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different. BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse. This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels. None
This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.
None
This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm.
The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority.
This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external None power supply is cut off. This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No, the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly
None
This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. There are 50 levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.
This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise, None the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.
None
None
If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel None activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.
If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the noNone traffic alarm is generated. This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless None link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.
None
None
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops None detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour). This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink None and downlink unbalance. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. None Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, None the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four None Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity.
This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology, None Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter Independent or Combining. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number. This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static power control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel allocation.
None
This parameter is to be viewed only.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL None timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
None
This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs None on a TRX.
This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no None TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.
This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel None connects to the BTS TMU.
This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.
None
This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode.
None
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located.
There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.
This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.
This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is
This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network.
None
This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.
None
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
None
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected. The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, None A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference
This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of PNone GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, PGSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU: When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required None power of cell, If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss. None
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
None
The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
None
The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is None insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled. 2. Static power sharing algorithm. 3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.
When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used, but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is None
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During None the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously None multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values. This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal strength of None this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid None subcell and overlaid subcell. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available This parameter available TCHH /2) x dynamic TCHF + Num. ofspecifies whether the100%. HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. None
None
None
When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis None Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The None parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU. The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in None the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs
This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel. Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally, set this parameter to 2. When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is reduced by Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority. Principles of taking values are as follows: This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the signal quality on signaling channels. The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is None set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set None to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed None and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel interference measurement is performed.
This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. None By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference. In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. Yes: Open No: Close This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported 2: dynamic PBT supported This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. These types include: Capacity with a higher priority Quality with a higher priority PS coordination with a relatively higher priority This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one fullrate TCH is allowed in a cell. If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH. The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter, the BSC does not initiate the conversion. If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network.
None
None Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be performed in the cell. If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large. If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state; If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).
None
None
None
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).
None
None
None
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits. This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the Um interface fails. In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding If this parameter is set to a great value, the call completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. This, however, increases the load of the BSC.
To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is recommended that the default value Different Band be used. That is, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in the original assignment. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is parameter must be set to No. disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls. If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short messages. In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial network. transmission, the default value of this parameter is No. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an None MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the
This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report is greater than the value of this parameter. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report, and then sequence the TDD cells. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. 0: - (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD cell is valid. If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a DCS1800 cell is valid. If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 cell is valid. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode. In connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm.
The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a reassignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with None an invalid BSIC.
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded.
None
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, None 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells. For example: This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be one None candidate cell for cell reselection. 0: -20 dB 1: -6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report.
This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.
Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I in GSM. RSCP, Received Signal Code Power
Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. None 0: - (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. None
This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS None starts to search for 3G cells. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the If the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on different frequency bands. Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR. When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the serving cell, a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported. These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if None the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
None
In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band. This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. measurement results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is recommended that classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate this parameter be set to Yes. assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. band of multi-band MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. None
This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
None
None
None
None
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um interface. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences. According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value. This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this parameter has six bits. None The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following speech versions respectively: half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access Level. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. But the error report rate is high. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding function. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames. the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames. the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller the handover does not make sense. If the value of the than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target target cells. cells. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the paging message. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. At present, the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure. When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. None
Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success rate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, congestion may occur. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST If the value of this parameter does not match with the value supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell.
During a handover decision, if this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter 3G cell. is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value None of this parameter. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB. If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the ping-pong handovers. original serving cell after a successful fast handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original ping-pong handovers. serving cell after a successful fast handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed handover. and no fast handover decision is made. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. inaccurate. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this None parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
None
None
During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold, in the UL subcell is increased. a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.
None
None
This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL load is increased. Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. None
If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO load is increased. period. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the blank zone is. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.
If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter, If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is load is not allowed. adversely affected. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell.
During the handover decision: If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate 3G cell. cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell None to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell None to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.
This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, in the OL subcell is increased. some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, in the UL subcell is increased. some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. previous target cell after the penalty time. Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the None OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.
After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL subcell handover. During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls with lower level may be handed over first. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the time This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
None
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
None
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of the following modes: System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH, the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example, 900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur None
None
None
When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.
None
None
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
#N/A
None
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
None
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.
None
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled.
None
This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher None than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
None
Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0. If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur.
Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer.
If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or None Pico layer, penalty is performed. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO. The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers. This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.
When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. for a certain period. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period. The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving slow. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too great value, the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently. When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. triggered. The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter triggered. corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the handover strip during load handover. range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold, all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU The setting of this parameter affects the load handover will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover each level is long. is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. The setting of this parameter determines the maximum Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV width of the handover strip during load handover. Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed. If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs handed over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells. When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell. The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover. System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the system. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the highest level. The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number of handover requests that are rejected increases. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of load handovers increases. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on the system is increased.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, greater than the value of this parameter. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, is greater than the value of this parameter. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the greater than the value of this parameter. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the is greater than the value of this parameter. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement the downlink measurement report is greater than the value report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision of this parameter, the handover decision related to no related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this measurement report emergency handover is triggered. parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially value, the no downlink measurement report handover selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available cannot be triggered. This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm. If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is This parameter is set according to the traffic volume. disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period. If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover. triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected. This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH REP_QUANT. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target cell. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. 110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is increased.
When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT BTS to the BSC. handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this the original MR to the BSC. parameter should be set to No. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.
This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0. on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely. If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period phase of call establishment. specified by this parameter. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period of call establishment. specified by this parameter. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL None subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. 0: NO; 1: YES None
This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intracell full-rate to half-rate handover are met. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent cell. Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. 1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads 1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent None 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more handover is triggered. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more handover is triggered. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more edge handover is triggered. difficult the edge handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover. This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
None
None
None
None
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled. The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer.
It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.
Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas, This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intracommon urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for highcell handover is not subject to this parameter. speed circumstances When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes. If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality.
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this parameter is set to 1, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2. If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell reselection. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used. Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell
None
None
None
The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset.
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic. To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of channel request messages by an MS. To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH, an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and S This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources. If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.
None
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be set to a great value. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large, T should be set to a small value. The increase in T and S prolongs the access time of an MS, thus affecting the access performance of the whole network. Therefore, None
None
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio resources too much, and influences the channel resource utilization. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer channel resources and cause the congestion. T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. assignment success rate. In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.
The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases channel resources and cause the congestion. the seized SDCCH channel. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.
None
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.
None
This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease. Qtru Signal Merge Switch The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal
None
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed None to send within a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell None paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.
This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an None integral multiple of 50 ms.
The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.
None
This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics None algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted.
None
None
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services.
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intrathrough assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the cell handover. assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network. This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this parameter is used to specify a delay.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the synchronous handover is performed. If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function after cell initialization.
This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested, some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends
This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of None the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.05. In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19, This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6 messages. If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. None
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.
This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction. This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus, the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. message to the BSC. As a result, the BSC frequently reports overload indication The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically time.
This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot None
This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS, None and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding. This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, this parameter is invalid. This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged. Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. The result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.
None
If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.
None
For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted.
None
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
None
None
None
If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The None load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption, the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the This parameter specifies the data service supported. This value of the parameter can be set as required. 0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported. 0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported. 0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported. If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In addition, the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is monitored. This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.
None
None
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased to some extent.
For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported. For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C. None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
None
None
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.
None
None
None
None
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive None quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control.
None
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink None receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering None formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink None power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in None a power control period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH None in a power control period.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.
None
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.
None
When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter, the power control stops.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB) adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of None DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power None control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. None Bad UpLEVDiff. In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 0. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. None
None If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value None of the DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL None Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL None Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to signal quality. a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to receive level. a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.
None
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
None If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value None If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III power control algorithm. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.
This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases. None
This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output This parameter specifies the initial power level. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH, namely, PCH. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss. This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105. After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101. In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value. After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period, the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the output power of the MS increases.
None If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes the wireless resources and influences the the access performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release delay of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the
This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold. This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can increase the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH, thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time; however, if the MS needs to send new uplink data, because the BSC6000 does not support the If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-based reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the load-based reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this quality is worsened. parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this quality is worsened. parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of cell reselections decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the probability of the cell reselection decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher value, the decision may not be performed immediately.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is thought to be invalid.
None
This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell. If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection.
The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily. calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold. This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.
This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.
If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time. target cell only if the target cell has a lower level. To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis. The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as None a candidate cell for handover. This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay class, and throughput class. This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS
None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.
This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP in the PFC. When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to calculate the measurement results. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment, thus improving the quality of links. - Setting and effect This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.
None
For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS4.
None
None
None
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is; otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value, it is hard to increase the CS type. of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value, it is hard to increase the CS type. of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value, it is hard to increase the CS type. of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2.
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the None first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to None CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value, it is hard to increase the CS type. this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value, it is hard to increase the CS type. this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services are affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1).
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. When a channel is idle, this timer is started. When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.
This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle. Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.
None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, channels. dynamic channels are used. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + services. static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are of TCHs + PDCHs. insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of None one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells
This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is used for cell reselection.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult for the cell to be selected. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for the cell to be selected. If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not be able to access the channel. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases. None
This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system.
This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.
This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.
None
In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. Yes: The MS can access another cell. No: The MS cannot access another cell. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards. c31standard: applied c31notuse: not applied This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported
None
None
None
In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network.
None
This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies many resources. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends a new Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS needs to wait for a long time before sending the next request. This may affect MS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because None
None
None
None
This parameter specifies the access control class. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. ...
None
None
None
This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection transfer mode. measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection idle mode. measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the measurement report is sent. after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be is sent. affected. The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: 1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage, This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value indicates a higher access priority. range 0-20 dB is recommended. 2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent this parameter should be set to a high value when the through the system message broadcast in each cell. coverage area of the micro cell is large. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. None This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension measurement report is sent frequently. This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement information is not obtained timely. This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3. None Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 None of the extension measurement report.
This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap. The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported
None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened.
This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell.
None
This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When None an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. None SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional. Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three network control None modes. nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102. the parameter value improves the transmission rate. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing use indicates that this parameter is not used. the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A), PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. None Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS. If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is radio resources are not used but occupied. set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS. If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a polling None message. If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended. This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. message. Therefore, 8bit is recommended. 8bit: access using the 8-bit burst 11bit: access using the 11-bit burst This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet DRX mode. During the period of non-DRX mode, the TBF transfer mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all establishment time decreases, but the power consumption the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS of the MS increases. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources receiving the last data block. (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet used but occupied for a long time. Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the Assignment message. TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes are Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs classified into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation Operation Mode III. Mode II is selected by default. When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is

2G Huawei NSN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2G Huawei NSN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameters

Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC

Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7 None None 0

not support GPRS

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell Extension Type

Cell Antenna Hopping

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

DL PC Allowed TRX Index

Yes Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

Depends on BTS/site configuration

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

No (tunable based on performance)

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Flex HSN Switch

Flex MAIO Switch

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

As per frequency plan

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

MS Power Prediction after HO

Inter-System Handover Enable

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

60(should same for same LAC)

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)